Owner`s manual | Dodge 2006 DH Ram Automobile User Manual

SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN LOCATION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .21
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . .15
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .39
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . .40
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .59
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
Ignition Key Removal
The shift lever must be in PARK. Turn the key to the
LOCK position, and then remove the key.
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Positions
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the ignition
switch, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
positions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder-equipped components on the
same key chain will not cause a key-related (transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used
when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or
other RF electronics will not cause interference with
this system.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one, which has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new
sentry keys to the system by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime
will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator
Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF
and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds, a single chime will sound and the Vehicle
Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on
again for 3 seconds, and then turn off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Keyless Entry
Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and
provide the following audible and visual signals: the
horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights
will flash; and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming of the System:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after 3
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
To Arm the System:
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the keyless
entry transmitter. After the last door is closed, or if all
doors are closed, the system will arm itself in about 16
seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Alarm
Indicator light will flash. If it does not illuminate, the
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
system is not arming. Also, if you open a door during the
arming period, the system will cancel the arming process.
If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door,
you must repeat one of the previously described arming
sequences.
To Disarm the System:
Either press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter or insert a valid sentry key into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START
position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system.
• The system remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and
opens any door the alarm will sound.
• When the system is armed, the interior power door
lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
disconnected the system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the system in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you disarm the
system. Check the vehicle for tampering.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned ON from the LOCK position.
NOTE:
• None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer
control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward
position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are
turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the panic alarm from distances up
to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work.
Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter
buttons for all keys.
Keyless Entry Transmitter
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual
for details.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10
seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter
with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual for details.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10
seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter
with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Turn Headlights On with
Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Sound Horn with
Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual for details.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter
for at least 4 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the
LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the
ignition in the LOCK position, and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
To unlatch the trunk:
Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to
unlatch the trunk.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the panic
alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 23 feet (7 meters) from
the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the
panic alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing downward, remove the small screw (if equipped).
2. Separate the two halves of the transmitter with a flat
blade tool. Do not damage the rubber seal during removal.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
(See page 14 for more information.)
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your dealer for details.
Separating Transmitter Halves
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together. If so equipped, install and tighten the screw
until snug. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the
two halves.
5. Test the transmitter operation.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
chime will sound if the key is in the LOCK or ACC
position and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
Power Door Lock Switch
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual for details.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual for details.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature in accordance with local laws.
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
protection door lock system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key or alike into
the child lock control and pull it upward.
NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door
can be opened only by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
• After engaging the child protection door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
WINDOWS
1. Open the rear door.
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key or alike into
the child lock control and pull it downward.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Down Feature
The driver door power window switch, and some model
passenger door power window switches have an auto
down feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For
details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until
Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Auto Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable
through. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the passenger
doors. When the switch is pressed, the window controls
on the passenger doors will not illuminate and the
passenger windows will be disabled.
Window Lockout Switch
Reset
Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected, or goes
dead, the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate
the auto-up feature, perform the following steps after
vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release Button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
With the ignition ON, the trunk open symbol will display
in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is
open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk
is closed.
NOTE: The transmission must be in Park before the
switch will operate.
With the key in the lock position or key out, the trunk
open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Trunk Release Button
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the trunk button on the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter two times.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Trunk Emergency Release
Emergency Release
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid,
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you will be carrying
children too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also
can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
Lap/Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your body
and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head
and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, and then
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Airbag Control
Module (refer to information on Airbags in this section).
Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert Programming
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
performing the following steps:
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
NOTE: DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN position, but
do not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60
seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON/ RUN
position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON/ RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
driver’s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: When the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert)
is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue
to illuminate as long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
in the shoulder belt. Use The Automatic Locking Mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Seat belts
that have the Automatic Locking Mode feature have a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
distinctive label on the webbing. Children 12 years old
and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender,
and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is
worn low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity.
Front Airbag Components
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain
airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain
airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Window Airbag
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the curtain airbags.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags,
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side Curtain Airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the location of the side curtain airbag. The
area where the side curtain airbag is located should
remain free from any obstructions.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain airbags,
If your vehicle is so equipped, the Side Curtain Airbag on
the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. However, even in collisions where
the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in
the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly.
do not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on
the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
up in the rear seat.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury
or death to infants in that position.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint
in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.
4. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section).
6. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
7. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
9. If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean
against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the
space between you and the door.
10. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section in this manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has side curtain airbags, they also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door
or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Air Bag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Airbag Control Module (ACM)
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
• Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows (if equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Seatbelt Reminder Light
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How The Airbag System Works
• The Airbag Control Module (ACM) determines if a
frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags
to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ACM. The ACM will not detect
roll over.
• The ACM also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
inflate.
• The ACM also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ACM detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
• The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When
the ACM detects a collision requiring the airbags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic
gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different
airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way, as the bags inflate to
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
driver’s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes
in the sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag
gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the
airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When
the ACM (with side impact option) detects a collision
requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals
the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity
of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain
airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one quarter of the time that it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the side curtain
airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The
side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9 cm)
thick when it is inflated.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ACM
detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the
driver and front passenger, and then to immediately
deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Enhanced Accident Response Feature
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel.
Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and
others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes
and associated injuries in order to assess and improve
vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations
initiated by DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be
requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of
DaimlerChrysler product
litigation
involving
a
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Seatbelt status
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Cruise control status (if applicable)
• Traction/stability control status (if applicable)
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
to
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag, which may cause
severe or fatal injury to the infant.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seat back, and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seat back and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
LATCH Anchorages
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in
the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight, however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull
it tight if necessary.
Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a
distinctive label on the seat belt webbing. The seat belt
must be in the automatic locking mode in order to enable
a child restraint to be tightly installed. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” in this section for details. A locking
clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking
feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on
the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is
activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all
of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing back in.
Tighten webbing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat
belt by depressing the button, allowing the webbing to
retract into the retractor.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into
the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of
value exposed.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Exhaust Gas
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
WARNING!
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO) follow the safety tips below.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Power Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped . . .68
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .68
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Power Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . .90
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
64 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . 102
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . .96
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . .96
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Electronic Speed Control Operation . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . .97
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Multi-Function Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . . .99
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 100
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65
䡵 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 112
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Erasing HomeLink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button . . . 113
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 118
䡵 Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Front Seat Cup Holders — Standard . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Front Seat Cup Holders — Premium . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Rear Seat Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
䡵 Load Leveling System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 122
3
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, full
forward, full rearward, and normal.
Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If
Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Inside
Rearview Mirror.
3
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Remote-Control Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Power Mirror Control
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
3
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
UConnect™ Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
3
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
3
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
3
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
3
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
UConnect™ System Features
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™
system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
3
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
3
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Performance is maximized under:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Recognition (VR)
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
3
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows, and
• dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
North American English
Primary
Alternate(s)
Zero
Oh
Add location
Add new
All
All of them
Confirmation prompts
Confirmations prompts
Delete a name
Delete
Language
Select language
List names
List all
List paired phones
List phones
Pager
Beeper
Phone pairing
Pairing
Phonebook
Phone book
Return to main menu
Return. Main menu
Select phone
select
Set up
Phone settings phone set
up
SEATS
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Seat Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position
desired. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be properly adjusted and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
3
Power Seat Switch
WARNING!
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s seat
up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat. The
passenger’s seat will move up or down, forward or
rearward.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Power Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Power Seat Recline Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
Lumbar Support Control Lever
Adjustable Head Restraint
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable restraints
should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as
practical.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
Heated seats, which are available only with leather
upholstery, provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated.
The head restraints have a locking button, which must be
pushed in to lower the head restraint. The restraints may
be raised without pushing in the button.
The controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel. After turning on the
ignition, you can choose from High, Off, or Low heat
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
settings. Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs will illuminate
for high, one for low, and none for off.
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically
after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
Front Heated Seat Switch
Press the switch once to select high-level heating. Press
the switch a second time to select low-level heating. Press
the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements.
If high-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Folding Rear Seat
Folding Rear Seats
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They
could be seriously injured in an accident. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Hood Safety Catch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
Hood Release Lever
Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the
safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under
the center front edge of the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6
inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
3
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, park light, and
instrument panel light operation.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights ON or
OFF according to ambient light levels. To turn the system
ON, rotate the headlight switch counter-clockwise to the
AUTO (A) position. When the system is ON, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also ON. This means the
headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you
turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic
System OFF, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
(A) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come ON in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights
On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlighted area.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switch
on again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition off to activate this feature
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Delay Turning Headlights
Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights, whenever the ignition switch is on, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the headlight
switch below the dimmer control. To activate the
front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the
low beam headlights and press the fog light switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights, or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multi-Function Lever
The multi-function lever controls the operation of the
turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing
lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
by moving the lever partially up or down without
moving beyond the detent. Releasing the lever at the
detent will provide 3 flashes.
If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse
or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure.
NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if
equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Multi-Function Lever
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Lever up or down and the
corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument
cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and
rear turn signal lights. You can also signal a lane change
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the Multi-Function Lever away from you to switch
the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever towards
you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.
This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam
and remain on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the
light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or
when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch, and is located on the
left side of the instrument panel. With
the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward
will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Overhead Console
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multi-function lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. The lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom “OFF”
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— if equipped, and radio when the parking lights or
headlights are on.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the end of the multi-function lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for Low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for High-speed wiper operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is
left in any position other than OFF.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn
the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval.
There are six delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds
between cycles.
Mist Feature
Push the multi-function lever inward (toward the steering column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe
cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you
release the lever.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multi-function lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the second detent and
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned OFF, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles
and then turn OFF.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights
On with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped.
3
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows both the brake and
accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the
driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the
driver’s seat cushion side shield.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Operation
The speed control lever (located on the left side of the
steering column) operates the system.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
RESUME/ACCEL
SET/DECEL
CANCEL
ON/OFF
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate:
Push the speed control lever inward (toward
the steering column) and release (“ON/OFF”).
The indicator light in the lever (and in the
instrument cluster on some models) will illuminate to show that the speed control system is ON. To
turn the system OFF, push the lever inward (toward the
steering column) again and release. At this time, the
system and the indicator light will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever down and release (“SET/DECEL”). Remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
• Speed control will only function in third, fourth, or
fifth gear when in the Autostick威 Mode (if equipped).
• The speed control may not engage if a different size
tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
To Deactivate:
The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the memory if you:
• Softly tap the brake pedal.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Push the speed control lever away from you (“CANCEL”).
Pushing and releasing the lever (“ON/OFF”) or turning
off the ignition erases the set speed from memory.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
To Resume Speed:
If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the
set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the previous set
speed. To do so, push the lever up and release (RES/
ACCEL), and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting:
When the speed control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the lever up and holding (“RES/ACCEL”).
When the lever is released, a new set speed will be
established.
Pushing the lever up and releasing (“RES/ACCEL”) once
will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each
time the lever is pushed up and released, speed increases
so that pushing the lever up and releasing three times
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, push the
lever down and hold (“SET/DECEL”). Release the lever
when the desired speed is reached, and a new set speed
will be established.
Pushing down and releasing the lever (“SET/DECEL”)
once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease.
Each time the lever is pushed down and released, speed
decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a
downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to
maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威),
storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroof
switch.
Overhead Console
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully
upward, past the second detent.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push the finger depression on the overhead console to
open. Push the finger depression to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLink姞) — IF
EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
NOTE: The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
WARNING!
• A moving garage door can cause injury to people
and pets in the path of the door. People or pets
could be seriously or fatally injured. Only use this
transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features it could cause injury or death. Call tollfree 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.homelink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate
can cause serious injury or death to people and
pets or damage to objects.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that you install a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed. This will
allow for quicker training and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display, which includes
HomeLink system messages. The EVIC is located in the
instrument cluster below the speedometer.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons.
Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays “Channels Cleared” (after 20 seconds); however, do not hold
the buttons for longer than 30 seconds. Do not repeat this
step if programming a second or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining HomeLink buttons.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the HomeLink button
(that you want to train) and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4 is
complete.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted under ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Programming.⬙
4. The EVIC will display “Channel X Training” (where X
is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons after the EVIC
displays “Channel X Trained.”
NOTE: If the EVIC displays “Did Not Train,” repeat
Steps 2–4.
HomeLink Buttons
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC displays “Channel
X Transmit” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3), then
programming is complete, and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2. Do not repeat
Step 1.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your garage door opener fails to respond to
the programmed HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver, and
your garage door opener is manufactured after 1995, it
may have a multiple security code system (rolling code
system). Please proceed to Steps 6–8 to complete the
programming of a rolling code equipped device (most
common garage door openers require this step.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer).
NOTE: You will have 30 seconds in which to initiate
Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2. Do not repeat
Step 1. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Programming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ Step 3 with the following:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release your hand-held transmitter
every two seconds until the frequency signal is accepted
successfully by HomeLink. The EVIC will display “Channel X Trained” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed
with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 4 to complete the procedure.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-3553515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ note below), follow the step noted:
• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons.
Release the buttons only when the EVIC displays
“Channels Cleared” (after 20 seconds); however, do
not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device a previously trained HomeLink
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The EVIC will display “Channel X Transmit” (where X
is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and then change to
“Channel X Training.” Without releasing the HomeLink
button, proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instructions in this section.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
Power Sunroof Controls
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent,
which operates regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For
details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until
Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury
could result.
NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash
receiver tray (if equipped) can be converted by your
authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The 12-volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if
equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power
available only when the ignition is on. This outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
Front Power Outlet
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
Center Console Power Outlet
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.); will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered by
your warranty.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
CUP HOLDERS
Front Seat Cup Holders — Standard
The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Front Seat Cup Holders — Premium
The cup holders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Push down on the cover as shown to expose the cup
holders. Close the cover when the cup holders are no
longer needed.
Front Seat Cup Holders
Front Seat Cup Holders
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cup Holders
The rear seat cup holders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cup holders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.
Rear Seat Cup Holders
STORAGE
Console Features
The center console contains a large storage bin. The
storage bin contains a four-slot coin holder (designed to
hold various size coins) and a rubber mat at the bottom of
the bin for noise control. The bin is large enough to hold
a portable AC/DC converter to power laptops, games, or
other electrical equipment. Two slots at the top right side
of the bin provide clearance for power cords to pass
conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed. This
feature is ideal for games, laptops, cell phones, or other
electrical equipment. The console’s front-opening lid
allows for easy access to the storage bin for the both the
driver and the front passenger. The inside portion of the
arm rest lid contains a penholder, a tissue holder, and a
tire gauge holder.
In addition to the internal storage, the console contains
two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding
small items. For vehicles not equipped with navigation
radio, the console also contains an extra storage bin
located below the climate control, which holds up to four
CD jewel cases.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Cargo Area
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They
could be seriously injured in an accident. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area.
The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
䡵 Base Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
䡵 Premium Instrument Cluster — If Equipped . . . 128
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 129
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Telephone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Navigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands
Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 151
4
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 155
▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD (6-Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free
Phone, Video, MP3, And WMA Capabilities . . . . 157
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 157
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . 160
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Audio Play) . . 166
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Play) . . . . . . . 166
䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc) Radio
With Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ REC Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Audio Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
䡵 Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ,
And RAK Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Tape Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Satellite Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . 178
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 180
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 175
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And
Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 190
4
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Hazard Switch
— Electronic Stability Program Off Button* /
Traction Control System Off Button*
5 — Glove Box
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Radio
Climate Control
Heated Seat Switch*
Power Outlet
10 — Ash Tray*
11 — Ignition Switch
12 — Hood Release
13 — Trunk Release Switch
14 — Headlight Switch
* If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — IF EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Trip Odometer Button
Base Cluster
The word ⬙TRIP⬙ will appear when this button is pressed.
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the
trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles (kilometers).
A second press of the button will display the outside
temperature in the odometer.
Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (kilometers). The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset it.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. (See page 105 for more
information.)
5. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each
gear range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the
red area.
6. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage. The light should turn on momentarily as
the engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on
while driving, it indicates a problem with the charging
system. Immediate service should be obtained.
4
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
light will also turn on while the engine is
running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the gear selector in park, and cycle the ignition key.
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
8. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H),
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, and you hear a chime, turn the engine off
immediately, and call for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE: A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on.
NOTE: Check for a defective outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate. (See page 98 for more
information.)
10. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for 6 to 8 seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on
during starting, or stays on, or turns on
while driving, then have the system inspected at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. (See page 49 for
more information.)
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. When this light turns on, the engine temperature is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned
off immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (See
page 272 for more information.)
4
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP or TCS — if
equipped. (See page 218 for more information.) (See
page 221 for more information.)
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake
Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The yellow ESP/BAS malfunction indicator
light will turn on when the key in the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position. The light should go out with the engine
running. The system will turn this light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both. (See page 221
for more information.)
14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the
engine is started. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle, and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. A single chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure
shown in section 7. (See page 295 for more information.)
15. High Beam Light
This light will turn on when the high beam
headlights are ON. Push the Multi-Function
lever away from the steering wheel to switch the
headlights to high beam. (See page 98 for more
information.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat
Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after
the bulb check or when driving. (See page 39 for more
information.)
17. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the front fog lights
are ON. (See page 97 for more information.)
19. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display —
If Equipped
This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. (See page 137 for more information.) (only on
vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted
switches).
NOTE: On non-EVIC equipped vehicles, the odometer
is located here.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
(See page 292 for more information.)
20. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on,
it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem
with the anti-lock brake system (if equipped).
4
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a
failure. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops
below a specified level.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
Both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light will
turn on in the event of an EBD failure. Immediate repair
of the ABS system is required in the event of an EBD
failure.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should turn on for approximately two seconds and then turn off. The light will
remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake
fault is detected. If the parking brake is not applied and
the light remains on, or if the light does not turn on, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
NOTE: The light will turn on when the ignition switch
in the ON position and the parking brake is applied. This
light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does
not show the degree of brake application. (See page 214
for more information.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
21. Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The VSA indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is
arming, and slowly when the VSA is armed. (See page 15
for more information.)
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected. The
flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault
condition is removed and reset. (See page 242 for more
information.)
4
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Anti-Lock Brake Light — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer. (See page 214 for
more information.)
24. Low Fuel Indicator Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. (See
page 254 for more information.)
25. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system called OBD. The OBD system monitors
engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will turn on when the key is in the ON
position before engine start. If the light does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. (See
page 292 for more information.)
4
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the
instrument cluster below the speedometer. Vehicles
equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons (described in this section) are also equipped with the EVIC.
The EVIC consists of the following:
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
• Compass display
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system displays (if equipped)
• Navigation system screens (if equipped)
• Audio mode display
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
MENU Status, Personal Settings, and Telephone (if
Button equipped).
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
also advances the radio to the next preset
FUNC- station, changes the side of the tape being
TION played (if so equipped), or changes the current
SELECT CD track being played (if so equipped) when
Button the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/Audio
screen.
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings (CusSCROLL tomer Programmable Features). The SCROLL
Button button also seeks up and down the radio
stations, CD track numbers (if so equipped), or
satellite radio channels (if so equipped) when the EVIC is
in the Compass/Temp/Audio screen.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio station frequencies, any one of
AUDIO twelve radio station preset frequencies, CD
MODE disc number, CD track number, tape, or any
Button one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending
on which radio is in the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
If Compass/Temp/Audio is already displayed when the
AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the radio mode
will change from AM to FM, to Tape, to CD, or to Satellite
(SAT) accordingly.
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km])
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages:
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km])
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Transmit
• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Training
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Channel 1, 2, OR 3 Trained
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Clearing Channels
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Channels Cleared
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
• Channels Defaulted
• Did Not Train
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5 of
this manual for more details)
4
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode
• Distance To Empty
• Trip A
• Trip B
Vehicles with the 5.7L Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
may be equipped with the FUEL SAVER MODE in the
Trip Functions of the EVIC. The FUEL SAVER MODE
message will display above the average fuel economy in
the EVIC display. This message will appear whenever
MDS allows the engine to operate on four cylinders,
which will vary depending on driving habits and vehicle
usage.
• Elapsed Time
• Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following:
• Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
4 Cylinder Operation - MDS On
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
This feature allows you to monitor when the MDS
switches off the fuel on four of the eight cylinders and it
can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase
the time in which the fuel saver mode is active.
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
• When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display.
8 Cylinder Operation - MDS Off
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
• Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
• Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
4
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
• Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3
seconds of resetting the currently displayed function
(>Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window).
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight comCOM- pass readings and the outside temperature.
PASS
Button
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn on the ignition switch.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
2 seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360° turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
4
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
2 seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
Telephone — If Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Telephone”
displays in the EVIC.
• Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air
time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed,
roaming, and no phone connection.
• UConnect Active.
• Caller ID phone number display.
When the appropriate conditions exist, and if supported
by the cell phone, the EVIC will display the following
telephone symbols:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
signal strength of the UConnect™ phone. The
number of horizontal bars increases as the
Signal strength of the UConnect™ phone signal inStrength creases.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an
incoming call.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC provides the following telephone information:
• Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery
strength, and signal strength in increments of 20
percent.
Incoming Call
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently in analog
mode.
Analog
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently roaming.
Roaming
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
you have voice mail.
Voice
Mail
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a
text message.
Text
Message
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
battery strength of the UConnect™ phone.
Battery
Strength
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
a phone connection has been made.
Call in
Progress
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently not available.
Phone
Not
Available
4
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation — If Equipped
Navigation Display Control
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
Turn By Turn Directions
The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a programmed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to
indicate the distance to the turn.
NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices:
“Language”
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect™
language selection. Please refer to “Language Selection”
in the HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™)
section of this manual for details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
“Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 Km/h)”
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened.
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Remote Key Unlock”
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless
entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st
Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Headlights On with Wipers” (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
4
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
“Delay Turning Headlights Off”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90
sec.” appears.
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears.
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
UConnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Turn by Turn Navigation” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
“Display Units of Measure in”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or
“METRIC” appears.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
4
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the radio, steering
wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD
changer (if equipped) will remain active for 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the radio, steering
wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD
changer (if equipped) will remain active for up to 60
minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. For details, refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
REF Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
4
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
4
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
• On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK position to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD
(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RAK Radio
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
4
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
mode only).
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance, and fade.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5-second time
out, the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Rock
Classic Rock
Adult Hits
16 Digit-Character
Display
None
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Rock
Classic_Rock
Adult_Hits
4
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft Rock
Top 40
Country
Oldies
Soft
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
Rhythm and Blues
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Foreign Language
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Personality
Public
College
Unassigned
Weather
Soft_Rock
Top_40
Country
Oldies
Soft
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
Rhythm_and_Blues
Soft_R_&_B
Foreign_Language
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Personality
Public
College
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Tape Eject
Press this button and the cassette will disengage and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch is turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
4
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
and WMA.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders
only.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
MPEG Specification
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
4
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and
WMA Audio Play)
Playback of MP3 and WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
ten seconds plays the previous file.
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may
be affected by the following:
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
Play)
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
LOAD/EJT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
The radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the
disc is loading.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
4
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.”
REC Radio
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
4
REC Setting the Clock
GPS Clock
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup”
and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the
TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup
screen appears.
2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS
Clock” and press ENTER.
3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press
ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press
ENTER.
4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight
Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and
press ENTER.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press
ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or
NAV then your changes will not be saved.
User Defined Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
choosing the “User Defined Clock” option.
1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed
Clock: User Defined Clock”.
2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is
highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the
“User Defined Time” display the number of hours you
have increased the clock by.
3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour.
4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +”
is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another minute.
5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute.
6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode.
Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Audio Clock Display
Select this option to change the size of the clock on the
audio screens.
1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the
TIME button on the navigation faceplate.
2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen.
4
4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME.
3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press
TIME again.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. The system is located in the center console storage
bin under the armrest lid. Refer to your VES™ User’s
Manual for detailed operating instructions.
Raising The DVD Screen
Accessing The VES
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
System Activation
NOTE: Your vehicle’s radio must be on and in satellite
mode when the activation process takes place.
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
Remote Control Location
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will display. Press the
SEEK UP button to display the next four digits. Continue
to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID
digits display. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits display. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will display. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode
when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned
OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was
pushed.
ESN/SID Access With REC Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the
radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simultaneously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the
screen.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK
Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information, such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at
888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or
unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information
available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button, while
performing a music type scan, will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display. This is located in the instrument cluster below
the speedometer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
VOLUME
Button
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio station frequencies, any one of
AUDIO twelve radio station preset frequencies, CD
MODE disc number, CD track number, tape, or any
Button one of 200 Satellite radio channels depending
on which radio is in the vehicle.
If Compass/Temp/Audio is already displayed when the
AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the radio mode
will change from AM to FM, to Tape, to CD, or to Satellite
(SAT) accordingly.
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to advance the radio to the next preset
FUNC- station, to change the side of the tape being
TION played (if so equipped), or to change the curSELECT rent CD track being played (if so equipped).
Button
when the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down the radio stations, CD track
SCROLL numbers (if so equipped), or satellite radio
Button channels (if so equipped).
The following describes the operation of the SCROLL
button in each mode:
Radio Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the
next listenable station up from the current setting. Press
the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tape Player Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the
next track on the cassette. Press the bottom of the
SCROLL button once either to listen to the beginning of
the current track or to listen to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within 5 seconds after the current
track begins to play.
Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button
twice to listen to the second track on the tape, three times
to listen to the third track, and so forth.
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the side
of the tape being played.
CD Player Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to listen to the
next track on the CD. Press the bottom of the SCROLL
button once to either listen to the beginning of the current
track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if
it is within one second after the current track begins to
play.
Press either the top or bottom of the SCROLL button
twice to listen to the second track on the CD, three times
to listen to the third track, and so forth.
Satellite Radio Operation
Press the top of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the
next listenable station up from the current setting. Press
the bottom of the SCROLL button once to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly diminished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat,
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Temperature Controls
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left controls the
blower. The control has an OFF position and four speed settings. The
blower will remain on until the control is turned to the OFF position or
the ignition is turned OFF.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Temperature Control
The rotary knob in the center controls
air temperature. Rotate the control to
the left for cooler air temperature and
to the right for warmer air temperature. Rotating the control to the extreme left provides the coldest setting.
Rotating the control to the extreme
right provides the warmest setting.
Mode Control
The rotary knob on the right controls
airflow distribution. Dots between
each of the mode selections identify
intermediate modes that allow the operator to fine-tune airflow distribution. The mode settings are as follows:
• Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only
when necessary.
• Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor
outlets and the outlets at the base of the
windshield. Air is also directed to the front
door windows through the side window demister
grilles.
• Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located
under the instrument panel and into the rear
seating area through vents under the front seats.
• Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and through the outlets located on the floor. Air flows through the registers in
the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to partially block airflow.
4
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in
the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.
• Recirculation Control
The mode control knob also controls the
recirculation feature. You can choose Bi-Level
Recirculation air outlets, Panel Recirculation
air outlets, or a mix or both while in this mode.
Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However,
when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is
re-used. Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle
rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be used to
temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on and turn off the air
conditioning. When the air conditioning is turned
on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
selected with the mode control. Press this button a second
time to turn off the air conditioning. An LED in the button
will illuminate when compressor operation is selected.
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
Automatic Temperature Controls
Automatic Operation
The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle
at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
To accomplish this, the system gathers information from
the controls on the climate control, from a dual sunsensor located in the top of the instrument panel, from an
infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control,
and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
The controls on the climate control provide the system
with operator input. The dual sun-sensor monitors sun
load coming through the windshield. The infrared sensor
independently measures the surface temperature of the
driver and passenger. Other sensors take account of
vehicle-speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and
engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the
system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, airflow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the Mode Control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place
the Blower Control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you
would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver
or passenger Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system
completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic operation.
Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button
while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the
control button to flash three times and then turn off.
This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and
requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the
system in recirculation mode (ten minutes).
This can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the
system will return to normal AUTO mode function
and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
• The surface of the climate control panel and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the location of the climate control
sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor
operation of this system.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
• Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
• Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor
outlets and the outlets at the base of the
windshield. Air is also directed to the front
door windows through the side window demister
grilles.
• Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located
under the instrument panel and into the rear
seating area through vents under the front seats.
• Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and through the outlets located on the floor. Air flows through the registers in
the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow.
• Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow.
• Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only. When the
air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with
the Mode control dial. Press this button a second
time to turn off the air conditioning. An LED in the
button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
• Recirculation Control
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. An LED in the button
illuminates when the recirculation mode is active. You
may use this feature separately.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside
air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or defrost/floor mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes
will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then
turn off.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
4
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
Section 7 of this manual for filter replacement instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Electric Rear Window Defroster
The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is
located on the climate control. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side
mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes of operation for the first push of the button, and
will turn off after approximately 5 minutes for the second
push of the button.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ 4 Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ 5 Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ AutoStick威 — 3.5L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 197
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Automatic Transmission —
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . 200
▫ AutoStick威 — 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
䡵 All Wheel Drive — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 211
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System — If Equipped . . . . . 214
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 Multi Displacement System (MDS) 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 Traction Control System (TCS) — If Equipped . . . . 218
䡵 Brake Assist System (BAS) — If Equipped . . . . 220
䡵 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator And ESP/TCS
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
䡵 Self–Sealing Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 240
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 227
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 228
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 257
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 257
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 263
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 270
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On
The Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
5
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up
may cause serious injury or death.
• Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or
by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause
excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in
overheating and vehicle fire, which may cause
serious or fatal injuries.
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the “START” position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine has not started
within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal
while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the key to the “LOCK” position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
5
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
once the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. See section 6 of
this manual for the proper jump-starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15
seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to
the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once
the engine is running smoothly. Do not overspeed the
engine.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “NORMAL STARTING” procedure
should be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission — General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon:
• Altitude
• Vehicle Loading
• Driving Style
• Selector lever position
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds
after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK
position first.
• The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
The selector lever is automatically locked while in the P
(Park) position. To move the selector lever out of the P
(Park) position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed
before the shift lock will release.
Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when
the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selector lever is in D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
selector lever is locked in the P (Park) position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle.
Over Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the
transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds
normal operating temperature, the transmission will
change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in D (Drive) position. After the
transmission cools down, it will return to normal operation.
5
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a brake transmission shift
interlock system (BTSI) that holds the selector lever in the
P (Park) position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the selector lever out of the P (Park)
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON
position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.
For electrical system malfunctions, there is an override
for the interlock system. In order to override this system
the key must be in the ignition with the switch in the
ACC or ON positions. Remove the rubber storage tray
from the bin located to the right of the selector lever. The
override can be activated by pressing the pink-colored
tab, which can be accessed through a hole inside the bin.
While the override is pressed, the shifter can be moved
out of the park position without pressing the brake. After
operation, return the rubber storage tray to its original
position.
4 Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
selector lever between these gears.
Brake Interlock Override
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in
the P (Park) position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
Selector Lever
Gear Ranges
P (Park)
P (Park) supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in
this range.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
5
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the selector lever into the P (Park)
position:
• When shifting into P (Park) move the lever all the way
forward until it stops, and is fully seated.
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the selector
lever is moved out of P (Park) before the ignition is
turned from the LOCK to ON position.
R (Reverse)
For moving the vehicle rearward. Always stop before
moving the lever to R (Reverse), except when rocking
the vehicle.
N (Neutral)
Engine may be started in this range.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason
with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in N (Neutral) and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
D (Overdrive)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest up shifts and down
shifts, and the best fuel economy. Select the “3” range
when frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range, such as when operating the
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers.
NOTE:
• If the vehicle is started in cold temperatures, shifts into
Overdrive may be delayed. Normal Overdrive and
shifting operation will resume when the temperature
of the transmission reaches the appropriate temperature. Refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” later in this section.
• If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or engage overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the
transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive
will resume normal operation.
3 (Third)
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmission will operate normally in First, Second and
Third while in this range. The “3” position should also
be used when descending steep grades to prevent
brake system distress.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
L (Low)
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts
will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while
downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections.
CAUTION!
Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
incline without applying the brakes. These practices
can cause overheating and damage to the transmission.
5
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops, or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usually after 1–3 miles (1.6–4.8 km) of driving). Because
engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into “Overdrive” when cold. This is
considered a normal condition. Pulling the selector
lever into the “3” position will show that the transmission is able to shift into and out of “Overdrive.”
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque
converter into the transmission. This is considered a
normal condition and it will not cause damage to the
transmission. The torque converter will refill within 5
seconds of shifting from P (Park) into any other gear
position.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the
transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The
transmission remains in second gear despite the forward
gear selected. P (Park), R (Reverse), and N (Neutral) will
continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle
to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
• Stop the vehicle and shift into P (Park).
• Turn the key to LOCK then start the engine.
• Shift into D (Drive) and resume driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, dealer service is
required.
5 Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from D (Drive) to P (Park) or R (Reverse) (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the
selector lever between these gears.
5
Selector Lever
Gear Ranges
P (Park)
P (Park) supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in
this range.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in
the P (Park) position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park), otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the selector lever into the P (Park)
position:
• When shifting into P (Park) move the lever all the way
forward until it stops, and is fully seated.
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the selector
lever is moved out of P (Park) before the ignition is
turned from the LOCK to ON position.
R (Reverse)
Shift into R (Reverse) gear only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
N (Neutral)
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive
axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be
moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage N
(Neutral) position while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The D (Drive) position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
CAUTION!
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy
trailers, use the AutoStick威 mode and select the “3”
range.
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason
with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in N (Neutral) and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
D (Drive)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy.
AutoStick威 Gear selection
The AutoStick威 feature can be selected by pressing the
selector lever to the right or the left with the lever in the
D (Drive) position. The gear currently selected is indicated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly, press the
selector lever in the “D -” direction and the transmission
will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D-” direction and
the transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to the next lowest gear for best acceleration.
5
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To avoid overrevving the engine when the
selector lever is moved in “D -” direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions per minute (RPM) limit would be exceeded.
Briefly, press the selector lever in the “D +” direction and
the transmission will shift from the current gear to the
next higher gear.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D +” direction
and the transmission will shift from the current gear
directly to gear “D.”
WARNING!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have an
accident.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, P (Park),
R (Reverse), and N (Neutral) will continue to operate.
Second gear will operate in the D (Drive) shifter position.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may be illuminated.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to a dealer for service. To reset the transmission,
use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the selector lever to the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode
Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the
transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three
times. Follow the reset procedure described under “Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode” in this section.
In Permanent Limp Home Mode, P (Park), R (Reverse),
and N (Neutral) will continue to operate. Second gear
will operate in the D (Drive) shifter position. The malfunction indicator light may illuminate.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick姞 — 3.5L Engine
Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
5
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
Autostick威 Operation
By placing the selector lever in the D (Drive) position, it
can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to
select a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the
selector lever to the Left (-) triggers a downshift and to
the Right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in
the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator.
You can shift in or out of the Autostick威 mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between the five available
gears. When you wish to engage Autostick,威 simply
move the selector lever to the Right or Left (D+/D-) while
in the D (Drive) position. The transmission will remain in
the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
Autostick姞 — 5.7L Engine
Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Autostick威 Operation
By placing the selector lever in the D (Drive) position, it
can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to
select a specific gear. Moving the selector lever to the Left
(-) triggers a downshift and to the Right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will display in the instrument cluster
on the transmission range indicator.
NOTE: In Autostick威 mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the selector
lever to the Right (D+) or Left (D-).
You can shift in or out of the Autostick威 mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. When
you wish to engage Autostick威, simply move the selector
lever to the Left or Right (D-/D+) while in the D (Drive)
position. To disengage Autostick威, hold the selector lever
to the right for at least one second. The transmission will
now operate automatically, shifting between the five
available gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
• You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time All Wheel Drive (AWD)
with Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)/Traction Control.
The front wheels provide 38% of the torque, and the rear
wheels provide 62% of the torque. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills
required.
• Avoid using speed control when Autostick威 is engaged.
CAUTION!
• The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick威 is
engaged.
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Autostick威 is engaged.
5
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and
then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the
parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal
and then release.
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
5
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector in
the P (Park) position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
parking brake before placing the gear selector in P (Park),
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of
park. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
Parking Brake
The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on
when the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is on.
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving: failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine off)
the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake
the vehicle will be much greater than that required with
the power system operating.
Anti-Lock Brake System — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• brake pedal pulsations,
• and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
5
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
•
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
WARNING!
•
•
•
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short amount of
time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
5
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7L
Engine Only
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The Traction Control System (TCS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The
TCS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a TCSequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator
Light, located in the instrument cluster, starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
wheels begin to spin. This indicates that the
TCS is active. If the indicator light begins to flash during
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The TCS OFF button is located in the center of the
instrument panel. To turn OFF the TCS, momentarily
press the button and the TCS Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the system ON again, momentarily press
the TCS OFF button and the indicator light will turn OFF.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, switch off the TCS by pressing the TCS OFF
button.
CAUTION!
When the TCS Indicator Light is illuminated continuously, the TCS is switched off. Avoid spinning
one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to
the drive train.
NOTE:
• The Traction Control System comes on each time the
ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur even if
you used the Traction Control Button to turn OFF the
system.
• The Traction Control System will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when in operation.
5
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS) — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is standard on vehicles
equipped with Electronic Stability Program (ESP). The
BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system
applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency
braking conditions than might otherwise be afforded
solely by the driver’s braking style. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking power
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light, located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The indicator light also flashes when the
TCS is active. If the indicator light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
5
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESP OFF button is located in the center of the
instrument panel. To turn OFF the ESP, momentarily
press the ESP OFF button and the ESP/TCS Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the system ON again,
momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the indicator
light will turn OFF.
When ESP is switched off, the engine torque reduction
feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. However, a feature of the system remains active. This feature controls
wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip
differential. If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the brake of the
spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This wheel slip
control is active at vehicle speeds between approximately
24 mph (40 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h).
CAUTION!
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, switch off the ESP by pressing the ESP OFF
button.
When the ESP/TCS Indicator Light is illuminated
continuously, the ESP is switched off. Avoid spinning one drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drive train.
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the
engine must be shut off (key in the ignition switch to
the OFF/LOCK or ACC position). Otherwise, the ESP
will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear
wheel brakes.
Synchronizing ESP
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light may illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS malfunction
indicator light should go out.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator and ESP/TCS
Indicator Lights
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow
ESP/BAS malfunction indicator light and the
yellow ESP/TCS indicator light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. They should go out with the
engine running.
The system will turn the ESP/BAS malfunction indicator
light on continuously while the engine running if it
detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and you have driven the vehicle several miles at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
5
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
5
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
5
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
5
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865
lbs. (392 Kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
5
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
5
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
5
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
5
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELF–SEALING TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner
liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in. (5 mm) to
minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the
safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the probability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
chain before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about 1⁄2
mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on Rear Wheels only.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested
operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
5
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this
manual for the recommended tire rotation frequency for
your type of driving. Remember, more frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire
rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF
EQUIPPED
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km)
after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires –
General Information” in this section for information
on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
• The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the lowpressure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects.
• The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
− For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is
27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23
psi (157 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
5
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels
can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant
from a can, or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Base System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. The audible chime
will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition
that it detects. Should this occur, you should stop as soon
as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on
your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information. Low
pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
Check TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system
fault still exists.
5
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare
tire. However, if you install the compact spare tire in
place of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still sound
each ignition key cycle. Once you repair or replace the
original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. The audible chime
will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition
that it detects. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display one or more Low
Pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front,
Right Rear) for 3 seconds and a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values flashing. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information. Low
pressure in the spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
5
NOTE: You can change the pressure units to display in
PSI, kPA, or BAR. Refer to “Language,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for details.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists. In addition to the
telltale and chime, the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for 3 seconds when a system fault is detected. In
the event that a fault occurs because the system did not
receive a pressure value from one or more Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensors, the EVIC will display the ⬙CHECK
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
NOTE: You can change the pressure units to display in
PSI, kPA, or BAR. Refer to “Language,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for details.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
NOTE: The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare
tire. However, if you install the compact spare tire in
place of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will still sound
each ignition key cycle. In addition, the EVIC will still
display a low-pressure message and a flashing pressure
value in the graphic display. Once you repair or replace
the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, and the graphic in the EVIC will
stop flashing and display a new pressure value, as long
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25
km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
5
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.7L Engine
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane of 87.
3.5L and 5.7L Engines
The 3.5L and 5.7L engines are designed to
meet all emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 87 to 89.
The manufacturer recommends the use of
89-octane for optimum performance. The routine use of
premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of
premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high
quality regular gasoline or mid-grade gasoline and in
some circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
emissions, engine performance, and durability for your
vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
5
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer if his/her gasoline
contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and they would result in additional
cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to
the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
or damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, are not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives are not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
5
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the
edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If
the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
Fuel Filler Door
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
5
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in Section 7 of this
manual for more information.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
5
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
EXAMPLE ONLY
Empty Weight
Load (Including driver, passengers, and cargo)
Total
GAWR
Front
Rear Axle
Axle
2054 lbs
1805 lbs
(932 kg)
(819 kg)
271 lbs
579 lbs
(123 kg)
(263 kg)
2325 lbs
2384 lbs
(1055 kg) (1081 kg)
2546 lbs
2708 lbs
(1155 kg) (1228 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” attached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWRs. This table is only an example.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
5
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Tongue weight (TW) is the downward force exerted on
the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be
less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You
must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width
of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
Weight Distributing Hitch System
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Max. GTW towable for
your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Heavy Duty
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
22 SQ. FT. (2.04 square
meters)
3.5L & 5.7L Automatic
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
32 SQ. FT. (2.97 square
meters)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
2.7L Automatic
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Up to 2 persons & Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Up to 3 persons & Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Up to 4 persons & Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Up to 5 persons & NO
Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Up to 2 persons & Luggage 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Up to 3 persons & Luggage 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Up to 4 persons & Luggage 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
Up to 5 persons & NO
Luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
5
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety
Information” in this section.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
5
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires–General Information” in this section for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation
procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for information on tread wear
indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for information on replacement
tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
5
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
4 - Pin Connector
7 - Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range
should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Autostick威 (If Equipped)
− For vehicles equipped with Autostick.威 By using the
Autostick威 modes, and selecting a specific gear range,
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear
range should be selected that allows for adequate
performance. For example, choose “4” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed
to maintain the desired speed.
− Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
5
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods, put transmission in
neutral and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− Refer to “Cooling System” under “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual for more information.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all
four wheels are off the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels
On The Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Wheel Cover Installation (If Required) . . . . . . 281
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
6
272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the center air outlets.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Hazard Flasher Switch
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warning Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to HI. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
6
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
2. Set the parking brake and place the gear selector in
PARK.
3. Turn OFF the ignition.
4. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Hazard Flasher Switch
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275
5. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
6
Opening The Access Panel
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
Jack Fastener
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277
Jacking and Changing a Tire
1. Block the wheel diagonally
opposite the flat tire. Passengers
should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
2. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
3. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the
wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
wheels, before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
pry the center cap off carefully.
6
Center Cap Removal
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal
edges and retention teeth.
278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counter-clockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
5. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279
6
Jack Engagement Locations
280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
12. Store the flat tire, jack, and tools.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and
tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
8. Mount the spare tire. For vehicles equipped with
wheel covers, refer to “Wheel Cover Installation.” Do not
attempt to install a wheel cover on a compact spare.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
9. Tighten all the lug nuts on the mounting studs.
• Keep tire inflated to 60 PSI (414 KPa) Cold Inflation
Pressure.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counter-clockwise.
• Avoid driving more than 50 miles (80 km) before
replacing tire and wheel.
11. Fully tighten the lug nuts. Torque the wheel lug nuts
to 100 ft/lb. (135 N. m).
• This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
not exceed 50 MPH (80 km/h) speed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 281
Wheel Cover Installation (If Required)
1. Tighten the two lug nuts on the mounting studs on
each side of the stud which is in alignment with the valve
stem.
2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel.
3. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the
two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to
install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts.
5. Return to Step 9 of the “Jacking and Changing a Tire”
procedure.
6
282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the
•
•
•
•
•
hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is
on. You can be hurt by the fan.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If
the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow
this procedure carefully.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean
over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to
touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush
contaminated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable
and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent
holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not
be disconnected and should only be replaced with a
battery of the same type (vented).
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but
do not allow the vehicles to touch one another.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the OFF (or
LOCK) position on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
WARNING!
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of
the discharge battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Jump-Starting
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with ESP, refer to ⬙Synchronizing ESP⬙ under ⬙Electronic Stability Program⬙ in
Section 5 of this manual if the ESP/BAS light (in the
instrument cluster) remains on continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6
284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
— if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
equipped before rocking the vehicle. For details, refer to
“Electronic Stability Program,” or “Traction Control System” in this manual.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between “First” and R (Reverse), do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don’t
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the following
limitations:
With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 miles (48 km),
and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48
6
286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles
(48 km), the vehicle must be transported using a flat bed
truck.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• If the transmission is not operative, or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 30 miles (48 km),
then the only approved method of towing is with
a flat bed truck. Damage to the transmission may
result.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY
The manufacture does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 2.7L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . . 300
䡵 3.5L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
䡵 5.7L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 292
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
䡵 Emissions Inspection And
Maintenance Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
7
288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center) . . . . . 323
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . 325
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 312
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
Park/Turn Light, And Front Side
Marker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Backup Light, Side Marker Light, Tail/Turn
Light, And Tail/Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . 317
▫ License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 318
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . 338
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders . . . 322
䡵 Fuses (Power Distribution Centers) . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289
2.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
7
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3.5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
5.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
7
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy
and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before
any emissions tests can be performed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer reset button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
7
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or
start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 2.7L, 3.5L Engines
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0L) of oil when the reading
is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
7
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0L)
of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE”
range will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE”
range on these engines.
Engine Oil Dipstick
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
Engine Oil Dipstick
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
CAUTION!
• Off-Road or desert operation.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B” in the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ in this manual.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to see if any apply to you.
If none of these applies to you, then change your engine
oil at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ in the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ in this manual.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and Go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service).
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months,
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
7
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.7L and 5.7L
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS).
Refer to “Multi Displacement System” under “Starting
and Operating” for details.
In areas where these grades are not generally available,
higher SAE grades may be used. Lubricants that have
both an SAE grade number and the API Certification
Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container
should be used.
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in 3.5L
Engines within the operating temperatures shown in the
engine oil viscosity chart. SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil is
allowed for use in the 3.5L Engine during cold weather
only to improve cold weather starting.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
10W-30 OIL VISCOSITY CHART
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
In areas where these grades are not generally available,
higher SAE grades may be used. Lubricants that have
both an SAE grade number and the API Certification
Symbol or ACEA category shown on the container
should be used.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
7
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments are
required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition
should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if required. Improper belt tension can cause belt
slippage and failure. Low generator belt tension can
cause battery failure.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule,
inspect belt and belt tensioner condition. Inspect belts for
evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or frayed cords and
replaced if there is indication of damage, which could
result in belt failure. Also, check belt routing to make sure
there is no interference between the belts and other
engine components. See your authorized dealer for service.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label in the engine compartment.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
For normal driving conditions, inspect and replace the
engine air cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Schedule “A.” For vehicles driven frequently in dusty or under
severe conditions, inspect and replace the engine air
cleaner filter at the intervals shown on Schedule “B.”
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your
authorized dealer for service.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
7
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,
safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the
engine off, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,
obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting.
Battery Location
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
7
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To
replace the filter, remove the access door in the cowl
screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the
filter adapter forward and down and remove used filter.
Install new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of
airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and
arrows on the filter indicate this).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual for
the recommended air conditioning filter replacement
intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
7
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage or damage when other maintenance is
performed.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks,
door hinges, trunk hinges, and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism,
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock
cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
Windshield Washers
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Exhaust
Gas” in the “Safety Tips” section of this manual.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct coolant type.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants, may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-base
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
7
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles (160
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant:
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
7
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Fuel System
The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’s
hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material
characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist
attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Maintenance Schedules” in this manual.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
7
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
• Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is
serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking,
scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced
immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose can
take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
WARNING!
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
NOTE:
• Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations
to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping
of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
WARNING!
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR威 DOT 3
product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to
FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake
failure during hard prolonged braking. You could
have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
7
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct fluid type.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit
your authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
Normal Usage — No change necessary
Severe Usage (fluid and filter) — Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Severe Usage is defined as:
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
The all wheel drive system consists of a Transfer Case
and Front Differential. The exterior surface of these
components should be inspected for evidence of fluid
leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as
possible.
The transfer case fluid inspection plug is located in the
middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case
fluid level, remove the inspection plug. The fluid level
should be even with the bottom of the hole. The transfer
case fill plug is located on the rear housing near the
output shaft.
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the
hole.
7
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Changes
The fluid should be changed as follows:
Normal Usage
Front Differential
No Service Required
Transfer Case
Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “A”
Severe Usage
Front Differential
No Service Required
Transfer Case
Refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B”
Severe Usage is defined as:
1. More than 50% of vehicle operation in stop and go
traffic where vehicle is driven regularly for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, such as in heavy city or
in construction zone traffic.
2. Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these components.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
The most common causes are:
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
7
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar威 touch up paint or equivalent on scratches
as soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar威
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar威or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
Interior Care
Use Mopar威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and Mopar威 Carpet Cleaner for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or Mopar威 Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners
or Armorall. Use Mopar威 Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
and Mopar威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
7
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar威 Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders
Perform the following steps to clean the center console
cup holders:
• Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cup holder
firmly and lift upward to remove.
• Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of
medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid
dish soap. Let soak for approximately one hour.
• After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it
back into the water about six times. This will loosen
any remaining debris.
• Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the
outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
• Carefully tuck the front, followed by the rear, then side
edges of the cup holder into the center console.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
FUSES (POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS)
Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center)
A power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment. This center contains fuses and relays.
Front Power Distribution Center
Cavity
1
2
3
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
4
—
5
6
—
—
7
—
8
—
9
—
10
—
Mini
Fuse
Description
—
—
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
—
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
5 Amp
Orange
—
—
Adjustable Pedals - if
equipped
AC Clutch/Horn
—
Front Control Module
(FCM)
Fog Lights - if equipped
Lights – License, Park,
Side Marker, Stop, Turn
Front Control Module
(FCM)
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/Starter
7
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Cartridge
Fuse
—
Mini
Fuse
Description
25 Amp Auto Shutdown/
Clear
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
25 Amp Powertrain Control
Clear
Module (PCM)
—
20 Amp Injectors, Ignition Coils
Yellow
—
—
—
30 Amp —
Anti-lock Brakes System
Pink
(ABS) Valves - if
equipped/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)
30 Amp —
Windshield Wiper/
Pink
Washer
50 Amp —
Radiator Fan
Red
Cavity
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
50 Amp
Red
40 Amp
Green
—
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
—
Starter
—
Anti-lock Brakes System
(ABS) Pump Motor - if
equipped
AC Clutch/Radiator Fan
High — Low
—
Radiator Fan - AWD
—
—
—
—
—
—
Front Control Module
(FCM)
Transmission - RLE
Front Control Module
(FCM)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
CAUTION!
• When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
rear compartment under the spare tire access panel. This
center contains fuses and relays.
Opening The Access Panel
7
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
6
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
—
7
8
—
—
9
—
10
11 *
12 *
13 *
14
—
—
—
—
—
15
—
16
—
5
Rear Power Distribution Center
Cavity
1
2
3
4
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
—
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
—
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
—
Battery
—
—
—
Battery
Mini
Fuse
—
Description
Heated Seats - if
equipped
20 Amp Fuel Pump
Yellow
—
—
15 Amp Ignition Switch/Airbag
Blue
Control Module (ACM)
20 Amp Console Power Outlet
Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp AC Heater Control/
Red
Cluster/Sentry Key Remote Keyless Entry
20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake ModYellow ule - if equipped
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
Cavity
17
Cartridge
Fuse
—
18
—
19
—
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
28
—
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Cluster
29
Cartridge
Fuse
—
30
—
31
32
33
34
—
—
—
—
Selectable Power Outlet
Stop Lights
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Airbag/Airbag Control
Module (ACM)
Curtain Airbag - if
equipped
Mini
Fuse
Description
5 Amp
Orange
Anti-lock Brakes Module
- if equipped/Cluster/
Front Control Module
(FCM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/
Sentry Key Remote Keyless Entry/Stop Lights
10 Amp Door Modules/Power
Red
Mirrors - if equipped/
Steering Control Module
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
35
36
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
37
—
38
—
39
—
Mini
Fuse
5 Amp
Orange
Description
Amplifier - if equipped/
Antenna/Ignition
Delay/Overhead
Console/Passenger Door
Lock & Express Power
Window Switch - if
equipped/Power Mirrors - if equipped/Rear
Defrost
20 Amp Hands Free Phone - if
Yellow equipped/Media System
Monitor DVD - if
equipped/Radio/
Satellite Receiver - if
equipped
15 Amp Transmission - NAG1
Blue
5 Amp Cargo Light/Overhead
Orange Console
10 Amp Heated Mirrors - if
Red
equipped
Cavity
40
41
42
43
44
Cartridge
Fuse
—
Mini
Fuse
Description
5 Amp
Orange
Heated Seats - if
equipped/Inside Rearview Mirror
—
10 Amp AC Heater Control/Tire
Red
Pressure Monitoring - if
equipped
30 Amp —
Front Blower Motor
Pink
30 Amp —
Amplifier - if equipped/
Pink
Antenna/Rear Defrost
20 Amp —
Amplifier - if equipped/
Blue
Front Control Module
(FCM)/Sunroof - if
equipped
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The Cluster is fused by the 25 amp circuit
breaker in Cavity 11. The Passenger Seat Switch is fused
by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12. The Door
Modules (except base), the Driver Door Lock Switch
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
(base), the Driver Express Power Window Switch (if
equipped), and the Passenger Door Lock Switch (base)
are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13. If
you experience temporary or permanent loss of these
systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
CAUTION!
• When installing the Power Distribution Center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Power Distribution Center, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Overhead Console Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157NAK
Front Fog Light—If Equipped . . . 9145/H10 (Serviced at
Dealer)
Front Sidemarker. . . . . . . . . . . 194 (Serviced at Dealer)
Tail/Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Tail/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight,
Park/Turn Light, and Front Side Marker Light
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly
counter-clockwise, and then pull it out of the headlight
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
4. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlight assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
1 — High Beam Headlight Bulb
2 — Low Beam Headlight Bulb
7
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3 — Park/Turn Light Bulb
4 — Side Marker Light Bulb
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
Backup Light, Side Marker Light, Tail/Turn Light,
and Tail/Stop Light
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light
assembly.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
tail light assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly
counter-clockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly.
2 — Side Marker Light Bulb
1 — Backup Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
3 — Tail/Turn Light Bulb
4 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb
9. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
10. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Close the trunk.
7
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Light
4. Push the replacement bulb into the socket assembly.
1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
6. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install the
screws.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket assembly.
1 — License Light Bulb
2 — Socket
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (approximate)
2.7 Liter Engine
3.5 Liter Engine
5.7 Liter Engine
Engine Oil-With Filter
2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
18 gallons
18 gallons
19 gallons
68 liters
68 liters
72 liters
6.0 qts.
6.0 qts.
7.0 qts.
5.7 liters
5.7 liters
6.6 liters
9.9 qts
9.4 liters
11.1 qts
10.5 liters
11.4 qts
10.8 liters
14.7 qts
13.9 liters
15.1 qts
14.3 liters
7
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (2.7 Liter)
Engine Oil (3.5 Liter)
Engine Oil (5.7 Liter)
Oil Filter (2.7 Liter)
Oil Filter (3.5 Liter)
Oil Filter (5.7 Liter)
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection (2.7 Liter)
Fuel Selection (3.5 Liter)
Fuel Selection (5.7 Liter)
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 10W-30 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent.
Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent.
Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
87 Octane
87 to 89 Octane
87 to 89 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Front Axle
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Mopar威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
API Certified GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Mopar威 Transfer Case Lubricant LX, P/N 05170055AA, or equivalent.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 342
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
342 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part, which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with a 2.7L engine, follow
Schedule “A” or “B” from 0 to 150,000 miles (0 to 250
000 km).
• For vehicles equipped with a 3.5L or 5.7L engine,
follow Schedule “A” or “B” from 0 to 120,000 miles
(0 to 200 000 km).
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B.” It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an 〫.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and go driving.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 343 M
A
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.〫
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).〫
• Off-road or desert operation.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this section.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow the
maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this
section.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions I
N
listed for Schedule ⬙B.⬙
T
E
Second is Schedule “A.” It is for vehicles that are not N
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched- A
N
ule ⬙B.⬙
C
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi- E
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the S
C
interval that occurs first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 344 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I At Each Stop for Fuel
N
T • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
E
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
N
A
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuN
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
C
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
Once a Month
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the CV joints and front and rear suspension
components.
• Inspect the battery, and clean, and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, and add as needed.
SCHEDULE “B”
SCHEDULE “B”
Follow Schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an 〫.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
345 M
A
I
N
• Taxi, police or delivery service (commercial ser- T
E
vices).〫
N
A
• Off-road or desert operation.
N
C
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your E
• Trailer towing.〫
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance rec- S
C
ommendations in Schedule “B” in this section.
H
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow the
maintenance recommendations in Schedule “B” in this
section.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 346 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
(10 000)
X
9,000
(15 000)
X
12,000
(20 000)
X
X
X
X
X
15,000
(25 000)
X
18,000
(30 000)
X
X
X*
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
21,000
(35 000)
X
24,000
(40 000)
X
27,000
(45 000)
X
X
X
X
30,000
(50 000)
X
33,000
(55 000)
X
36,000
(60 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
347 M
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 348 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel
Drive (AWD) only.
39,000
(65 000)
X
42,000
(70 000)
X
X
X
45,000
(75 000)
X
48,000
(80 000)
X
51,000
(85 000)
X
54,000
(90 000)
X
X
X
X
X*
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. * ‡
Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
if not done at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
57,000
(95 000)
X
60,000
63,000
66,000
69,000
(100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
72,000
(120 000)
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
X
X
349 M
X
X
X
M 350 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. * ‡
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
(125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
90,000
(150 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Replace the engine timing belt. 3.5L Engine.
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 102,000 miles if
not done at 60 months.
Rotate the tires.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) only.
93,000
(155 000)
X
96,000
(160 000)
X
99,000
(165 000)
X
102,000
(170 000)
X
X
X
X
X
105,000
(175 000)
X
X*
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
X
351 M
X
M 352 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not reA placed at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months,
if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
108,000
(180 000)
X
111,000
(185 000)
X
114,000
(190 000)
X
117,000
(195 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
120,000
(200 000)
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at 3 months.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
123,000
(205 000)
X
126,000
(210 000)
X
129,000
(215 000)
X
132,000
(220 000)
X
X
X
X
X
135,000
(225 000)
X
X*
X
X
X
X
X
353 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 354 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not reA placed at 3 months.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
138,000
(230 000)
X
141,000
(235 000)
X
144,000
(240 000)
X
147,000
(245 000)
X
X
X
X
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Change the rear axle fluid.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) only.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacture
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
150,000
(250 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
SCHEDULE “A”
355 M
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12,000
(20 000)
[12]
X
X
18,000
(30 000)
[18]
X
X
24,000
(40 000)
[24]
X
X
30,000
(50 000)
[30]
X
36,000
(60 000)
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 356 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if
E required.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and
rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt
and tensioner. Replace if required.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months
if not done at 102,000 miles.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV
valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel
Drive (AWD) only.
42,000
(70 000)
[42]
X
X
48,000
(80 000)
[48]
X
X
54,000
(90 000)
[54]
X
X
60,000
66,000
72,000
(100 000) (110 000) (120 000)
[60]
[66]
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Replace the spark plugs. 2.7L, 3.5L Engines.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *‡
Replace the engine timing belt. 3.5L Engine.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) only.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 102,000
miles if not done at 60 months.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
78,000
(130 000)
[78]
X
X
84,000
(140 000)
[84]
X
X
90,000
(150 000)
[90]
X
96,000
(160 000)
[96]
X
X
102,000
(170 000)
[102]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
357 M
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 358 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if reE quired.*
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Replace the spark plugs. 5.7L Engine.
Check and Inspect the accessory drive belt and tensioner. Replace if required.
Check and replace, if necessary, the PCV valve. *
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
Rotate the tires.
108,000
(180 000)
[108]
X
X
114,000
(190 000)
[114]
X
X
120,000
(200 000)
[120]
X
126,000
(210 000)
[126]
X
X
132,000
(220 000)
[132]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Inspect the air cleaner filter and replace if required.*
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Inspect the front and rear brake linings and rotors.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Rotate the tires.
Change the Transfer Case Fluid - All Wheel Drive (AWD) only.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
138,000
(230 000)
[138]
X
X
144,000
(240 000)
[144]
X
X
359 M
150,000
(250 000)
[150]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service
For Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . 364
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
9
362 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 363
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
364 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 365
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
9
366 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 367
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
9
368 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
370 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 310
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,307
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . . 300
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,182
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,305
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . 304,305
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . 180,182,304
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,233
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,47
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,49,61,131
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 42,47
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,317
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . 309,310,337
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,216
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . 15
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,25
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . 182
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 200,205,316,317
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,339
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
INDEX 371
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,205
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . 204
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,209
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 21
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,303
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,313
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,339
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,214
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . 59
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,253
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 178
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,157
10
372 INDEX
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,52,53,55,57
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . 54,55
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,158,169
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . 310
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,311
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 309,337,338
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,322
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,181,186
INDEX 373
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . 172
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . 105
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . 221
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . 130
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . 137
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . 293,342
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,290,291
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,296
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,290,291
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,338
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,253
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,337
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,337,338
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,337
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10
374 INDEX
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . 48
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,253,308
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,307
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,305
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,338
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,131
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,296
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 338
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,133
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,338
INDEX 375
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,337
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . 109
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,293
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,22,249
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257,259
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . 257,259
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Headlights
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . 98
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,102
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . 98
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . . 109
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,313
10
376 INDEX
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,52
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,128,129
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . 101
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jacking Instructions
Jump Starting . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
275
277
277
282
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
14
13
12
17
11
42
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . 54,55
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,95
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,49,61,131
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,216
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,214
INDEX 377
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,108
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,223
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . 130
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,133
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . 96,102
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,132
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,129
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99,108
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 136
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330,331
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 136
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 135,242
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,131
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 129
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,258
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
10
378 INDEX
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,55
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . 136,293
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294,364
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . 218
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,338
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,296
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,296
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,338
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
INDEX 379
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,337
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,337
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,293
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . 109
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,272
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 365
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . 228
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 117
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217,305
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . 110,113,146
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,110,113
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . .
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . .
.....
Cap)
.....
.....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
235
310
149
168
10
380 INDEX
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,157,180
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,173
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,157
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . 176
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,173
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,34
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 38
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,52,53,57
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,35
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
INDEX 381
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,135
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 309,338
Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,158,169
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 197,200,205
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,131
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,236,275
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217,305
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,329
10
382 INDEX
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,329
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . 42
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . 182
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . 130,273
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . 228
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,232,366
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,277
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,277
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228,229
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 242
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,232
Self-Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
INDEX 383
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . 270
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,205,316
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . 109
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . 17
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,131
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 6
10
384 INDEX
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,256,258
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,329
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 15
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,307
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,307
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,116
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,47
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,186
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,101,307
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Download PDF

advertising